1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/lockdep.h>
22 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
23 #include <net/codel.h>
24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
25 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
26
27 /**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36 /**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
48 */
49
50 /**
51 * DOC: Warning
52 *
53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57 /**
58 * DOC: Frame format
59 *
60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
72 */
73
74 /**
75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
89 /**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
103 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
104 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
105 *
106 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
107 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
108 *
109 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
110 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
111 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
112 *
113 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
114 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
115 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
116 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
117 * ieee80211_return_txq().
118 *
119 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
120 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
121 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
122 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
123 * .release_buffered_frames().
124 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
125 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
126 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
127 */
128
129 /**
130 * DOC: HW timestamping
131 *
132 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps
133 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks.
134 *
135 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing
136 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp
137 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the
138 * ieee80211_rx_status struct.
139 *
140 * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine
141 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field
142 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the
143 * ieee80211_tx_status struct.
144 */
145 struct device;
146
147 /**
148 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
149 *
150 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
152 */
153 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
154 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
156 };
157
158 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
159
160 /**
161 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
162 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
164 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
166 */
167 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
168 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
169 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
170 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
171 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
172 };
173
174 /**
175 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
176 *
177 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
178 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
179 *
180 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
181 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
182 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
183 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
184 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
185 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
186 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
187 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
188 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
189 */
190 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
191 u16 txop;
192 u16 cw_min;
193 u16 cw_max;
194 u8 aifs;
195 bool acm;
196 bool uapsd;
197 bool mu_edca;
198 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
199 };
200
201 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
202 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
203 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
204 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
205 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
206 };
207
208 /**
209 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
210 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
214 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
215 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
216 */
217 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
218 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
219 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
220 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
221 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
222 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
223 };
224
225 /**
226 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
227 *
228 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
229 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
230 *
231 * @def: the channel definition
232 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
233 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
234 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
235 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
236 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
237 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
238 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
239 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
240 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
241 */
242 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
243 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
244 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
245
246 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
247
248 bool radar_enabled;
249
250 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
251 };
252
253 /**
254 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
255 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
256 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
257 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
258 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
259 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
260 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
261 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
262 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
263 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
264 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
265 * for changes/removal.)
266 */
267 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
268 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
269 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
270 };
271
272 /**
273 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
274 *
275 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
276 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
277 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
278 * done.
279 *
280 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
281 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching
282 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
283 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
284 */
285 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
286 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
287 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf;
288 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
289 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
290 };
291
292 /**
293 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
294 *
295 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed()
296 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed.
297 *
298 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
299 * also implies a change in the AID.
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
304 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
307 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
308 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
309 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
310 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
311 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
312 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
313 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
314 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
316 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
317 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
322 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
323 * changed
324 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
325 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
326 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
327 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
328 * context had been assigned.
329 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
330 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
331 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
332 * keep alive) changed.
333 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
334 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
335 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
336 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
337 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
338 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
339 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
340 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
341 * status changed.
342 *
343 */
344 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
345 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
346 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
347 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
348 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
349 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
350 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
351 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
352 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
353 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
354 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
355 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
356 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
357 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
358 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
359 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
360 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
361 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
362 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
363 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
364 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
365 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
366 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
367 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
368 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
369 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
370 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
371 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
372 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
373 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
374 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
375 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
376 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
377
378 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
379 };
380
381 /*
382 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
383 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
384 * filtering will be disabled.
385 */
386 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
387
388 /**
389 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
390 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
391 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
392 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
393 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
394 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
395 * once each time the timeout triggers.
396 */
397 enum ieee80211_event_type {
398 RSSI_EVENT,
399 MLME_EVENT,
400 BAR_RX_EVENT,
401 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
402 };
403
404 /**
405 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
406 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
407 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
408 */
409 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
410 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
411 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
412 };
413
414 /**
415 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
416 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
417 */
418 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
419 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
420 };
421
422 /**
423 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
424 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
425 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
426 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
427 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
428 */
429 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
430 AUTH_EVENT,
431 ASSOC_EVENT,
432 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
433 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
434 };
435
436 /**
437 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
438 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
439 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
440 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
441 */
442 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
443 MLME_SUCCESS,
444 MLME_DENIED,
445 MLME_TIMEOUT,
446 };
447
448 /**
449 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
450 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
451 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
452 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
453 */
454 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
455 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
456 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
457 u16 reason;
458 };
459
460 /**
461 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
462 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
463 * @tid: the tid
464 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
465 */
466 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
467 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
468 u16 tid;
469 u16 ssn;
470 };
471
472 /**
473 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
474 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
475 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
476 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
477 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
478 * @u:union holding the fields above
479 */
480 struct ieee80211_event {
481 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
482 union {
483 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
484 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
485 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
486 } u;
487 };
488
489 /**
490 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
491 *
492 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
493 *
494 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
495 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
496 */
497 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
498 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
499 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
500 };
501
502 /**
503 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
504 *
505 * @lci: LCI subelement content
506 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
507 * @lci_len: LCI data length
508 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
509 */
510 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
511 const u8 *lci;
512 const u8 *civicloc;
513 size_t lci_len;
514 size_t civicloc_len;
515 };
516
517 /**
518 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
519 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
520 *
521 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
522 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
523 */
524 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
525 u32 min_interval;
526 u32 max_interval;
527 };
528
529 /**
530 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
531 *
532 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
533 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
534 *
535 * @addr: (link) address used locally
536 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO
537 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
538 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
539 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
540 * ACK, BACK or both
541 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
542 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
543 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
544 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
545 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
546 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
547 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
548 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
549 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
550 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
551 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
552 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
553 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
554 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
555 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
556 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
557 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
558 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
559 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
560 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
561 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
562 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
563 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
564 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
565 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
566 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
567 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
568 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
569 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
570 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't
571 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this.
572 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
573 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
574 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
575 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
576 * the current band.
577 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
578 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
579 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
580 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
581 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
582 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
583 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
584 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
585 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
586 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
587 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
588 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
589 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
590 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
591 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
592 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
593 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
594 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
595 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
596 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
597 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
598 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
599 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
600 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
601 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
602 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
603 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
604 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
605 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
606 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
607 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
608 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
609 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
610 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
611 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
612 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
613 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
614 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
615 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
616 * station.
617 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
618 * responder functionality.
619 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
620 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
621 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
622 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
623 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
624 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
625 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
626 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
627 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
628 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
629 * connected to (STA)
630 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
631 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
632 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
633 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
634 * interval.
635 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
636 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
637 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
638 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
639 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
640 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
641 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
642 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
643 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
644 * for read access.
645 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
646 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
647 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
648 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
649 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
650 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
651 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
652 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
653 * for read access.
654 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
655 */
656 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
657 const u8 *bssid;
658 unsigned int link_id;
659 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
660 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
661 bool uora_exists;
662 u8 uora_ocw_range;
663 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
664 bool he_support;
665 bool twt_requester;
666 bool twt_responder;
667 bool twt_protected;
668 bool twt_broadcast;
669 /* erp related data */
670 bool use_cts_prot;
671 bool use_short_preamble;
672 bool use_short_slot;
673 bool enable_beacon;
674 u8 dtim_period;
675 u16 beacon_int;
676 u16 assoc_capability;
677 u64 sync_tsf;
678 u32 sync_device_ts;
679 u8 sync_dtim_count;
680 u32 basic_rates;
681 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
682 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
683 u16 ht_operation_mode;
684 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
685 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
686 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
687 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
688 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
689 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
690 bool qos;
691 bool hidden_ssid;
692 int txpower;
693 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
694 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
695 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
696 u16 max_idle_period;
697 bool protected_keep_alive;
698 bool ftm_responder;
699 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
700 /* Multiple BSSID data */
701 bool nontransmitted;
702 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
703 u8 bssid_index;
704 u8 bssid_indicator;
705 bool ema_ap;
706 u8 profile_periodicity;
707 struct {
708 u32 params;
709 u16 nss_set;
710 } he_oper;
711 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
712 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
713 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
714 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
715 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
716 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
717 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
718 u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
719 u8 pwr_reduction;
720 bool eht_support;
721
722 bool csa_active;
723 bool mu_mimo_owner;
724 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
725
726 bool color_change_active;
727 u8 color_change_color;
728 };
729
730 /**
731 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
732 *
733 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
734 *
735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
737 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
738 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
739 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
740 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
741 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
742 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
743 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
744 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
745 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
746 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
747 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
748 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
749 * station
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
752 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
755 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
756 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
757 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
758 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
759 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
760 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
761 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
762 * hardware queue.
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
764 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
765 * is for the whole aggregation.
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
767 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
768 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
769 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
770 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
772 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
773 * off-channel operation.
774 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
775 * (header conversion)
776 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
777 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
778 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
779 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
780 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
781 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
782 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
783 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
784 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
785 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
786 * queue gets full.
787 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
788 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
789 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
790 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
791 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
792 * should kick the MLME state machine.
793 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
794 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
795 * status to user space)
796 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
797 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
798 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
799 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
800 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
801 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
802 * handled properly by the device.
803 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
804 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
805 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
806 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
807 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
808 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
809 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
810 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
811 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
812 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
813 * PS-Poll responses.
814 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
815 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
816 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
818 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
819 * monitor injection).
820 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
821 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
822 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
823 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
824 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
825 *
826 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
827 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
828 */
829 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
830 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
831 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
836 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
837 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
838 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
839 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
840 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
841 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
842 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
843 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
844 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
845 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
846 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
847 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
848 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
849 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
850 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
851 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
852 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
853 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
854 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
855 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
856 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
857 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
858 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
859 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
860 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
861 };
862
863 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
864
865 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
866
867 /**
868 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
869 *
870 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
871 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
872 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
873 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
874 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
875 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
876 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
877 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
878 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
879 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
880 * it can be sent out.
881 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
882 * has already been assigned to this frame.
883 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
884 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
885 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
886 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally
887 * for sequence number assignment
888 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this
889 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is
890 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is
891 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame
892 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if
893 * it's intended for an MLD.
894 *
895 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
896 */
897 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
898 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
899 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
900 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
901 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
902 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
903 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
904 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
905 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
906 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8),
907 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9),
908 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000,
909 };
910
911 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf
912 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \
913 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \
914 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK)
915
916 /**
917 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
918 *
919 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
920 *
921 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
922 */
923 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
924 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
925 };
926
927 /*
928 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
929 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
930 */
931 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
932 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
933 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
934 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
935 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
936 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
937 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
938 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
939
940 /**
941 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
942 * Rate Control algorithm.
943 *
944 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
945 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
946 *
947 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
948 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
949 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
950 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
951 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
952 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
953 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
954 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
955 * Greenfield mode.
956 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
957 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
958 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
959 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
960 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
961 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
962 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
963 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
964 */
965 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
966 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
967 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
968 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
969
970 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
971 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
972 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
973 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
974 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
975 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
976 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
977 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
978 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
979 };
980
981
982 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
983 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
984
985 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
986 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
987
988 /* maximum number of rate stages */
989 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
990
991 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
992 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
993
994 /**
995 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
996 *
997 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
998 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
999 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
1000 *
1001 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
1002 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
1003 *
1004 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
1005 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
1006 *
1007 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
1008 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
1009 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
1010 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
1011 * information::
1012 *
1013 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
1014 *
1015 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
1016 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
1017 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
1018 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
1019 * information should then contain::
1020 *
1021 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
1022 *
1023 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
1024 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
1025 */
1026 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
1027 s8 idx;
1028 u16 count:5,
1029 flags:11;
1030 } __packed;
1031
1032 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
1033
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)1034 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
1035 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
1036 {
1037 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
1038 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
1039 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
1040 }
1041
1042 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1043 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1044 {
1045 return rate->idx & 0xF;
1046 }
1047
1048 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1049 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1050 {
1051 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1052 }
1053
1054 /**
1055 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1056 *
1057 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1058 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1059 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1060 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1061 *
1062 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1063 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races),
1064 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which
1065 * link the frame will be transmitted on
1066 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1067 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1068 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1069 * @control: union part for control data
1070 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1071 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1072 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1073 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1074 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1075 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1076 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1077 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1078 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1079 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1080 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1081 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1082 * @pad: padding
1083 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1084 * @status: union part for status data
1085 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1086 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1087 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1088 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1089 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1090 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1091 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1092 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
1093 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1094 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1095 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1096 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1097 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1098 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1099 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1100 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1101 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1102 */
1103 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1104 /* common information */
1105 u32 flags;
1106 u32 band:3,
1107 ack_frame_id:13,
1108 hw_queue:4,
1109 tx_time_est:10;
1110 /* 2 free bits */
1111
1112 union {
1113 struct {
1114 union {
1115 /* rate control */
1116 struct {
1117 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1118 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1119 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1120 u8 use_rts:1;
1121 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1122 u8 short_preamble:1;
1123 u8 skip_table:1;
1124 /* 2 bytes free */
1125 };
1126 /* only needed before rate control */
1127 unsigned long jiffies;
1128 };
1129 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1130 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1131 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1132 u32 flags;
1133 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1134 } control;
1135 struct {
1136 u64 cookie;
1137 } ack;
1138 struct {
1139 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1140 s32 ack_signal;
1141 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1142 u8 ampdu_len;
1143 u8 antenna;
1144 u16 tx_time;
1145 u8 flags;
1146 void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)];
1147 } status;
1148 struct {
1149 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1150 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1151 u8 pad[4];
1152
1153 void *rate_driver_data[
1154 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1155 };
1156 void *driver_data[
1157 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1158 };
1159 };
1160
1161 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1162 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1163 {
1164 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1165 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1166 */
1167 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1168 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1169 }
1170
1171 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1172 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1173 {
1174 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1175 }
1176
1177 /***
1178 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
1179 *
1180 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
1181 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
1182 *
1183 * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
1184 * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
1185 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
1186 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
1187 * that was used when sending the packet.
1188 */
1189 struct ieee80211_rate_status {
1190 struct rate_info rate_idx;
1191 u8 try_count;
1192 u8 tx_power_idx;
1193 };
1194
1195 /**
1196 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1197 *
1198 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1199 * @info: Basic tx status information
1200 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1201 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
1202 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
1203 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1204 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds
1205 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action
1206 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1207 */
1208 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1209 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1210 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1211 struct sk_buff *skb;
1212 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
1213 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp;
1214 u8 n_rates;
1215
1216 struct list_head *free_list;
1217 };
1218
1219 /**
1220 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1221 *
1222 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1223 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1224 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1225 *
1226 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1227 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1228 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1229 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1230 */
1231 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1232 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1233 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1234 const u8 *common_ies;
1235 size_t common_ie_len;
1236 };
1237
1238
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1239 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1240 {
1241 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1242 }
1243
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1244 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1245 {
1246 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1247 }
1248
1249 /**
1250 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1251 *
1252 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1253 *
1254 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1255 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1256 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1257 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1258 *
1259 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
1260 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
1261 * any fields it needs after calling this helper.
1262 */
1263 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1264 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1265 {
1266 int i;
1267
1268 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1269 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1270 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1271 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1272 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1273 /* clear the rate counts */
1274 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1275 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1276 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1277 }
1278
1279
1280 /**
1281 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1282 *
1283 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1284 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1285 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1286 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1287 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1288 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1289 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1290 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1291 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1292 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1293 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1294 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1295 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1296 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1297 * de-duplication by itself.
1298 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1299 * the frame.
1300 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1301 * the frame.
1302 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1303 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1304 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1305 * merging.
1306 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1307 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1308 * (including FCS) was received.
1309 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1310 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1311 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1312 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1313 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1314 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1315 * each A-MPDU
1316 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1317 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1318 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1319 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1320 * on this subframe
1321 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1322 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1323 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1324 * done by the hardware
1325 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1326 * processing it in any regular way.
1327 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1328 * them for sniffing purposes.
1329 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1330 * monitor interfaces.
1331 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1332 * them for sniffing purposes.
1333 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1334 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1335 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1336 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1337 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1338 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1339 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1340 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1341 * interleaved with other frames.
1342 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1343 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1344 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1345 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1346 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1347 * the first subframe.
1348 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1349 * be done in the hardware.
1350 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1351 * frame
1352 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1353 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1354 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1355 *
1356 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1357 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1358 * - DATA3_CODING
1359 * - DATA5_GI
1360 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1361 * - DATA6_NSTS
1362 * - DATA3_STBC
1363 *
1364 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1365 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1366 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1367 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1368 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1369 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1370 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1371 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1372 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1373 * hardware or driver)
1374 */
1375 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1376 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1377 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1378 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1379 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1380 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1381 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1382 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1383 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1384 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1385 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1386 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1387 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1388 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1389 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1390 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1391 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1392 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1393 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1394 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1395 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1396 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1397 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1398 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1399 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1400 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1401 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1402 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1403 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1404 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1405 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1406 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30),
1407 };
1408
1409 /**
1410 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1411 *
1412 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1413 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1414 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1415 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1416 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1417 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1418 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1419 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1420 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1421 */
1422 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1423 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1424 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1425 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1426 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1427 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1428 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1429 };
1430
1431 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1432
1433 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1434 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1435 RX_ENC_HT,
1436 RX_ENC_VHT,
1437 RX_ENC_HE,
1438 };
1439
1440 /**
1441 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1442 *
1443 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1444 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1445 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1446 *
1447 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1448 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1449 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1450 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1451 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only
1452 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames.
1453 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1454 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1455 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1456 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1457 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1458 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1459 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1460 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1461 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1462 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1463 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1464 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1465 * values were filled.
1466 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1467 * support dB or unspecified units)
1468 * @antenna: antenna used
1469 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1470 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1471 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1472 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1473 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1474 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1475 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1476 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1477 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1478 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1479 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1480 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1481 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1482 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1483 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1484 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag
1485 * is set only when connection is MLO.
1486 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with
1487 * @link_valid.
1488 */
1489 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1490 u64 mactime;
1491 union {
1492 u64 boottime_ns;
1493 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp;
1494 };
1495 u32 device_timestamp;
1496 u32 ampdu_reference;
1497 u32 flag;
1498 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1499 u8 enc_flags;
1500 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1501 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1502 u8 rate_idx;
1503 u8 nss;
1504 u8 rx_flags;
1505 u8 band;
1506 u8 antenna;
1507 s8 signal;
1508 u8 chains;
1509 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1510 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1511 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1512 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4;
1513 };
1514
1515 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1516 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1517 {
1518 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1519 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1520 }
1521
1522 /**
1523 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1524 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1525 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1526 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1527 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1528 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1529 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1530 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1531 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1532 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1533 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1534 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1535 * @data field.
1536 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1537 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1538 * length
1539 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1540 *
1541 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1542 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1543 * data.
1544 */
1545 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1546 u32 present;
1547 u8 align;
1548 u8 oui[3];
1549 u8 subns;
1550 u8 pad;
1551 u16 len;
1552 u8 data[];
1553 } __packed;
1554
1555 /**
1556 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1557 *
1558 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1559 *
1560 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1561 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1562 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1563 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1564 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1565 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1566 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1567 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1568 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1569 * for more.
1570 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1571 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1572 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1573 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1574 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1575 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1576 * operating channel.
1577 */
1578 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1579 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1580 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1581 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1582 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1583 };
1584
1585
1586 /**
1587 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1588 *
1589 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1590 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1591 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1592 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1593 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1594 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1595 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1596 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1597 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1598 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1599 */
1600 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1601 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1602 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1603 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1604 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1605 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1606 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1607 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1608 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1609 };
1610
1611 /**
1612 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1613 *
1614 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1615 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1616 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1617 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1618 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1619 */
1620 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1621 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1622 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1623 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1624 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1625
1626 /* keep last */
1627 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1628 };
1629
1630 /**
1631 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1632 *
1633 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1634 *
1635 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1636 *
1637 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1638 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1639 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1640 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1641 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1642 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1643 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1644 *
1645 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1646 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1647 *
1648 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1649 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1650 *
1651 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1652 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1653 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1654 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1655 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1656 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1657 *
1658 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1659 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1660 * configured for an HT channel.
1661 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1662 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1663 */
1664 struct ieee80211_conf {
1665 u32 flags;
1666 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1667
1668 u16 listen_interval;
1669 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1670
1671 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1672
1673 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1674 bool radar_enabled;
1675 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1676 };
1677
1678 /**
1679 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1680 *
1681 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1682 * operation.
1683 *
1684 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1685 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1686 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1687 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1688 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1689 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1690 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1691 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1692 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1693 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1694 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1695 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1696 * channel, expressed in TU.
1697 */
1698 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1699 u64 timestamp;
1700 u32 device_timestamp;
1701 bool block_tx;
1702 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1703 u8 count;
1704 u32 delay;
1705 };
1706
1707 /**
1708 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1709 *
1710 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1711 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1712 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1713 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1714 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1715 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1716 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1717 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1718 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1719 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1720 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1721 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1722 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1723 */
1724 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1725 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1726 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1727 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1728 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1729 };
1730
1731
1732 /**
1733 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1734 *
1735 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1736 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1737 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1738 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1739 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1740 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1741 * mac80211.
1742 */
1743
1744 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1745 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1746 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1747 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2),
1748 };
1749
1750 /**
1751 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration
1752 * @assoc: association status
1753 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not
1754 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
1755 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
1756 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
1757 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
1758 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
1759 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
1760 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
1761 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
1762 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
1763 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
1764 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
1765 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
1766 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
1767 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
1768 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
1769 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
1770 * your driver/device needs to do.
1771 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections
1772 * (station mode only)
1773 */
1774 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg {
1775 /* association related data */
1776 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
1777 bool ibss_creator;
1778 bool ps;
1779 u16 aid;
1780
1781 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
1782 int arp_addr_cnt;
1783 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
1784 size_t ssid_len;
1785 bool s1g;
1786 bool idle;
1787 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1788 };
1789
1790 /**
1791 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1792 *
1793 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1794 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1795 *
1796 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1797 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg
1798 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1799 * or the BSS we're associated to
1800 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration,
1801 * indexed by link ID
1802 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1803 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1804 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the
1805 * API calls meant for that purpose.
1806 * @addr: address of this interface
1807 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1808 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1809 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1810 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1811 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1812 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1813 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1814 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1815 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1816 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1817 * restrictions.
1818 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1819 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1820 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1821 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1822 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1823 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1824 * interface.
1825 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1826 * for this interface.
1827 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1828 * sizeof(void \*).
1829 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1830 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1831 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1832 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1833 */
1834 struct ieee80211_vif {
1835 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1836 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg;
1837 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1838 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
1839 u16 valid_links, active_links;
1840 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1841 bool p2p;
1842
1843 u8 cab_queue;
1844 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1845
1846 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1847
1848 u32 driver_flags;
1849 u32 offload_flags;
1850
1851 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1852 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1853 #endif
1854
1855 bool probe_req_reg;
1856 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1857
1858 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1859
1860 /* must be last */
1861 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1862 };
1863
1864 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \
1865 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \
1866 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \
1867 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \
1868 (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id])))
1869
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1870 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1871 {
1872 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1873 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1874 #endif
1875 return false;
1876 }
1877
1878 /**
1879 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1880 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1881 *
1882 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1883 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1884 *
1885 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1886 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1887 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1888 */
1889 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1890
1891 /**
1892 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1893 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1894 *
1895 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1896 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1897 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1898 */
1899 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1900
1901 /**
1902 * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners
1903 * @vif: the interface to check
1904 */
lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1905 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1906 {
1907 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx);
1908 }
1909
1910 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \
1911 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \
1912 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif))
1913
1914 /**
1915 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1916 *
1917 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1918 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1919 *
1920 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1921 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1922 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1923 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1924 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1925 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1926 * generation in software.
1927 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1928 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1929 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1930 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1931 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1932 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1933 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1934 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1935 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1936 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1937 * MIC.
1938 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1939 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1940 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1941 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1942 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1943 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1944 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1945 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1946 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1947 * only for management frames (MFP).
1948 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1949 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1950 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1951 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1952 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1953 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1954 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1955 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1956 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1957 * generation only
1958 */
1959 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1960 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1961 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1962 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1963 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1964 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1965 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1966 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1967 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1968 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1969 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1970 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1971 };
1972
1973 /**
1974 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1975 *
1976 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1977 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1978 *
1979 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1980 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1981 * encrypted in hardware.
1982 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1983 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1984 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1985 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1986 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1987 * @keylen: key material length
1988 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1989 * data block:
1990 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1991 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1992 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1993 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1994 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1995 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys
1996 */
1997 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1998 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1999 u32 cipher;
2000 u8 icv_len;
2001 u8 iv_len;
2002 u8 hw_key_idx;
2003 s8 keyidx;
2004 u16 flags;
2005 s8 link_id;
2006 u8 keylen;
2007 u8 key[];
2008 };
2009
2010 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
2011
2012 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
2013 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
2014
2015 /**
2016 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
2017 *
2018 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
2019 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2020 * reverse order than in packet)
2021 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2022 * reverse order than in packet)
2023 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2024 * reverse order than in packet)
2025 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2026 * reverse order than in packet)
2027 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
2028 */
2029 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
2030 union {
2031 struct {
2032 u32 iv32;
2033 u16 iv16;
2034 } tkip;
2035 struct {
2036 u8 pn[6];
2037 } ccmp;
2038 struct {
2039 u8 pn[6];
2040 } aes_cmac;
2041 struct {
2042 u8 pn[6];
2043 } aes_gmac;
2044 struct {
2045 u8 pn[6];
2046 } gcmp;
2047 struct {
2048 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
2049 u8 seq_len;
2050 } hw;
2051 };
2052 };
2053
2054 /**
2055 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
2056 *
2057 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2058 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
2059 *
2060 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
2061 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
2062 */
2063 enum set_key_cmd {
2064 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
2065 };
2066
2067 /**
2068 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
2069 *
2070 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
2071 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
2072 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
2073 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
2074 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
2075 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
2076 */
2077 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
2078 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
2079 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
2080 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
2081 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
2082 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
2083 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
2084 };
2085
2086 /**
2087 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
2088 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
2089 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
2090 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2091 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2092 * (including 80+80 MHz)
2093 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
2094 *
2095 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2096 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
2097 */
2098 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2099 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2100 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2101 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2102 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2103 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
2104 };
2105
2106 /**
2107 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2108 *
2109 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2110 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2111 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2112 */
2113 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2114 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2115 struct {
2116 s8 idx;
2117 u8 count;
2118 u8 count_cts;
2119 u8 count_rts;
2120 u16 flags;
2121 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2122 };
2123
2124 /**
2125 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2126 *
2127 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2128 *
2129 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2130 * to the STA.
2131 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2132 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2133 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2134 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2135 * per peer TPC.
2136 */
2137 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2138 s16 power;
2139 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2140 };
2141
2142 /**
2143 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links
2144 *
2145 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the
2146 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change.
2147 *
2148 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2149 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2150 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2151 *
2152 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2153 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2154 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2155 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2156 *
2157 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2158 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2159 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2160 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2161 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2162 */
2163 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates {
2164 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2165
2166 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2167 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2168 };
2169
2170 /**
2171 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2172 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2173 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2174 *
2175 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2176 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2177 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2178 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink)
2179 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2180 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2181 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2182 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2183 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2184 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2185 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2186 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2187 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2188 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2189 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2190 * the station moves to associated state.
2191 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2192 *
2193 */
2194 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2195 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2196 u8 link_id;
2197 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2198
2199 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2200 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2201 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2202 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2203 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2204 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2205
2206 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg;
2207
2208 u8 rx_nss;
2209 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2210 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2211 };
2212
2213 /**
2214 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2215 *
2216 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2217 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2218 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2219 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2220 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2221 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2222 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2223 * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2224 *
2225 * @addr: MAC address
2226 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2227 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2228 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2229 * Can be modified by driver.
2230 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2231 * otherwise always false)
2232 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2233 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2234 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2235 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2236 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2237 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2238 * @rates: rate control selection table
2239 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2240 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2241 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2242 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2243 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station.
2244 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2245 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2246 * unlimited.
2247 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links
2248 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA
2249 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it.
2250 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2251 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2252 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2253 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2254 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2255 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2256 * the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2257 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2258 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2259 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2260 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2261 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2262 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2263 * by the AP.
2264 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO
2265 */
2266 struct ieee80211_sta {
2267 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2268 u16 aid;
2269 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2270 bool wme;
2271 u8 uapsd_queues;
2272 u8 max_sp;
2273 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2274 bool tdls;
2275 bool tdls_initiator;
2276 bool mfp;
2277 bool mlo;
2278 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2279
2280 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur;
2281
2282 bool support_p2p_ps;
2283
2284 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2285
2286 u16 valid_links;
2287 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2288 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
2289
2290 /* must be last */
2291 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2292 };
2293
2294 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP
2295 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
2296 #else
lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta * pubsta)2297 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta)
2298 {
2299 return true;
2300 }
2301 #endif
2302
2303 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \
2304 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \
2305 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2306
2307 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \
2308 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \
2309 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \
2310 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \
2311 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id)))
2312
2313 /**
2314 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2315 *
2316 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2317 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2318 *
2319 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2320 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2321 */
2322 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2323 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2324 };
2325
2326 /**
2327 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2328 *
2329 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2330 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2331 */
2332 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2333 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2334 };
2335
2336 /**
2337 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2338 *
2339 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2340 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2341 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2342 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2343 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2344 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2345 *
2346 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2347 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2348 */
2349 struct ieee80211_txq {
2350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2351 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2352 u8 tid;
2353 u8 ac;
2354
2355 /* must be last */
2356 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2357 };
2358
2359 /**
2360 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2361 *
2362 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2363 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2364 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2365 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2366 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2367 *
2368 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2369 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2370 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2371 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2372 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2373 * algorithm.
2374 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2375 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2376 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2377 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2378 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2379 * CCK frames.
2380 *
2381 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2382 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2383 * the FCS at the end.
2384 *
2385 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2386 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2387 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2388 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2389 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2390 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2391 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2392 *
2393 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2394 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2395 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2396 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2397 *
2398 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2399 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2400 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2401 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2402 *
2403 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2404 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2405 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2406 *
2407 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2408 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2409 *
2410 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2411 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2412 *
2413 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2414 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2415 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2416 *
2417 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2418 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2419 *
2420 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2421 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2422 *
2423 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2424 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2425 * the stack.
2426 *
2427 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2428 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2429 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2430 *
2431 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2432 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2433 * dtim_period).
2434 *
2435 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2436 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2437 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2438 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2439 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2440 * only in that case.
2441 *
2442 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2443 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2444 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2445 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2446 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2447 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2448 *
2449 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2450 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2451 * software.
2452 *
2453 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2454 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2455 * active interfaces.
2456 *
2457 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2458 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2459 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2460 *
2461 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2462 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2463 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2464 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2465 * supported cipher suites.
2466 *
2467 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2468 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2469 * for frames.
2470 *
2471 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2472 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2473 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2474 * control for more details.
2475 *
2476 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2477 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2478 *
2479 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2480 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2481 * is supported.
2482 *
2483 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2484 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2485 *
2486 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2487 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2488 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2489 *
2490 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2491 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2492 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2493 * CSA frame.
2494 *
2495 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2496 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2497 *
2498 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2499 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2500 *
2501 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2502 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2503 *
2504 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2505 * within A-MPDU.
2506 *
2507 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2508 * for sent beacons.
2509 *
2510 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2511 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2512 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2513 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2514 *
2515 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2516 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2517 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2518 * timeout.
2519 *
2520 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2521 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2522 *
2523 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2524 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2525 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2526 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2527 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2528 *
2529 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2530 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2531 *
2532 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2533 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2534 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2535 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2536 *
2537 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2538 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2539 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2540 *
2541 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2542 * TDLS links.
2543 *
2544 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2545 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2546 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2547 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2548 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2549 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2550 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2551 *
2552 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2553 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2554 *
2555 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2556 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2557 *
2558 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2559 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2560 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2561 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2562 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2563 *
2564 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2565 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2566 * TXQs to start with.
2567 *
2568 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2569 * length in tx status information
2570 *
2571 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2572 *
2573 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2574 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2575 *
2576 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2577 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2578 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2579 *
2580 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2581 * offload
2582 *
2583 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2584 * offload
2585 *
2586 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2587 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2588 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2589 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2590 * the stack.
2591 *
2592 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
2593 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
2594 *
2595 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting
2596 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that.
2597 *
2598 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2599 */
2600 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2601 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2602 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2603 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2604 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2605 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2606 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2607 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2608 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2609 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2610 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2611 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2612 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2613 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2614 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2615 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2616 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2617 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2618 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2619 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2620 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2621 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2622 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2623 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2624 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2625 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2626 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2627 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2628 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2629 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2630 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2631 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2632 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2633 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2634 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2635 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2636 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2637 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2638 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2639 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2640 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2641 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2642 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2643 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2644 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2645 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2646 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2647 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2648 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2649 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2650 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2651 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2652 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2653 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
2654 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX,
2655
2656 /* keep last, obviously */
2657 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2658 };
2659
2660 /**
2661 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2662 *
2663 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2664 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2665 *
2666 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2667 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2668 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2669 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2670 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2671 *
2672 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2673 *
2674 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2675 * along with this structure.
2676 *
2677 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2678 *
2679 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2680 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2681 *
2682 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2683 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2684 *
2685 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2686 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2687 *
2688 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2689 * that HW supports
2690 *
2691 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2692 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2693 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2694 *
2695 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2696 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2697 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2698 *
2699 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2700 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2701 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2702 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2703 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2704 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2705 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2706 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2707 *
2708 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2709 * can handle.
2710 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2711 * the hw can report back.
2712 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2713 *
2714 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2715 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2716 * aggregation.
2717 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2718 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2719 * it shouldn't be set.
2720 *
2721 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2722 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2723 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2724 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2725 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2726 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2727 *
2728 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2729 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2730 *
2731 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2732 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2733 *
2734 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2735 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2736 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2737 * adding _BW is supported today.
2738 *
2739 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2740 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2741 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2742 *
2743 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2744 *
2745 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2746 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2747 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2748 * device_timestamp.
2749 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2750 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2751 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2752 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2753 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2754 *
2755 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2756 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2757 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2758 *
2759 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2760 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2761 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2762 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2763 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2764 * neither enabled.
2765 *
2766 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2767 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2768 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2769 *
2770 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2771 * device.
2772 *
2773 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2774 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2775 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2776 *
2777 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2778 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2779 *
2780 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2781 *
2782 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
2783 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
2784 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
2785 *
2786 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
2787 */
2788 struct ieee80211_hw {
2789 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2790 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2791 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2792 void *priv;
2793 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2794 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2795 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2796 int vif_data_size;
2797 int sta_data_size;
2798 int chanctx_data_size;
2799 int txq_data_size;
2800 u16 queues;
2801 u16 max_listen_interval;
2802 s8 max_signal;
2803 u8 max_rates;
2804 u8 max_report_rates;
2805 u8 max_rate_tries;
2806 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2807 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2808 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2809 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2810 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2811 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2812 struct {
2813 int units_pos;
2814 s16 accuracy;
2815 } radiotap_timestamp;
2816 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2817 u8 uapsd_queues;
2818 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2819 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2820 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2821 u8 weight_multiplier;
2822 u32 max_mtu;
2823 const s8 *tx_power_levels;
2824 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
2825 };
2826
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2827 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2828 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2829 {
2830 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2831 }
2832 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2833
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2834 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2835 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2836 {
2837 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2838 }
2839 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2840
2841 /**
2842 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2843 *
2844 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2845 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2846 */
2847 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2848 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2849
2850 /* Keep last */
2851 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2852 };
2853
2854 /**
2855 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2856 *
2857 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2858 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2859 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2860 * @status: channel-switch response status
2861 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2862 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2863 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2864 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2865 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2866 */
2867 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2868 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2869 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2870 u8 action_code;
2871 u32 status;
2872 u32 timestamp;
2873 u16 switch_time;
2874 u16 switch_timeout;
2875 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2876 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2877 };
2878
2879 /**
2880 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2881 *
2882 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2883 *
2884 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2885 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2886 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2887 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2888 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2889 *
2890 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2891 */
2892 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2893
2894 /**
2895 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2896 *
2897 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2898 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2899 */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2900 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2901 {
2902 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2903 }
2904
2905 /**
2906 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2907 *
2908 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2909 * @addr: the address to set
2910 */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2911 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2912 {
2913 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2914 }
2915
2916 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2917 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2918 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2919 {
2920 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2921 return NULL;
2922 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2923 }
2924
2925 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2926 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2927 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2928 {
2929 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2930 return NULL;
2931 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2932 }
2933
2934 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2935 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2936 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2937 {
2938 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2939 return NULL;
2940 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2941 }
2942
2943 /**
2944 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2945 * @hw: the hardware
2946 * @skb: the skb
2947 *
2948 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2949 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2950 */
2951 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2952
2953 /**
2954 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2955 *
2956 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2957 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2958 *
2959 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2960 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2961 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2962 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2963 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2964 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2965 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2966 *
2967 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2968 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2969 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2970 *
2971 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2972 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2973 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2974 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2975 *
2976 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2977 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2978 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2979 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2980 *
2981 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2982 *
2983 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2984 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2985 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2986 * based on the receive flags.
2987 *
2988 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2989 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2990 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2991 * keys.
2992 *
2993 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2994 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2995 * handler.
2996 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2997 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2998 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2999 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
3000 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
3001 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
3002 *
3003 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
3004 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
3005 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
3006 *
3007 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
3008 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
3009 * requirements:
3010 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
3011 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
3012 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
3013 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
3014 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
3015 encrypted with the new key when also needing
3016 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
3017 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
3018 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
3019 */
3020
3021 /**
3022 * DOC: Powersave support
3023 *
3024 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
3025 *
3026 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
3027 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
3028 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
3029 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
3030 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
3031 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
3032 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
3033 * it finds traffic directed to it.
3034 *
3035 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
3036 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
3037 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
3038 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
3039 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
3040 *
3041 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
3042 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
3043 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
3044 *
3045 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
3046 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
3047 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
3048 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
3049 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
3050 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
3051 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
3052 *
3053 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
3054 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
3055 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
3056 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
3057 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
3058 * periods.
3059 *
3060 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
3061 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
3062 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
3063 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
3064 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
3065 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
3066 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
3067 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
3068 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
3069 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
3070 *
3071 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
3072 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
3073 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
3074 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
3075 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
3076 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
3077 *
3078 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
3079 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
3080 */
3081
3082 /**
3083 * DOC: Beacon filter support
3084 *
3085 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
3086 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
3087 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
3088 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
3089 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
3090 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
3091 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
3092 *
3093 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
3094 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
3095 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
3096 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
3097 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
3098 *
3099 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
3100 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
3101 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
3102 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
3103 *
3104 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
3105 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
3106 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
3107 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
3108 *
3109 * - a list of information element IDs
3110 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
3111 *
3112 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
3113 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
3114 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
3115 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
3116 * vendor information elements.
3117 *
3118 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
3119 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
3120 *
3121 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
3122 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
3123 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
3124 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
3125 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
3126 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
3127 *
3128 *
3129 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
3130 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
3131 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
3132 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
3133 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
3134 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
3135 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
3136 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3137 *
3138 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3139 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3140 * signal strength threshold checking.
3141 */
3142
3143 /**
3144 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3145 *
3146 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3147 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3148 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3149 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3150 *
3151 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3152 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3153 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3154 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3155 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3156 * hardware flags.
3157 *
3158 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3159 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3160 * turned off otherwise.
3161 *
3162 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3163 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3164 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3165 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3166 */
3167
3168 /**
3169 * DOC: Frame filtering
3170 *
3171 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3172 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3173 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3174 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3175 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3176 *
3177 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3178 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3179 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3180 *
3181 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3182 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3183 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3184 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3185 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3186 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3187 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3188 *
3189 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3190 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3191 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3192 * or dropped.
3193 *
3194 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3195 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3196 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3197 * the flag, but not clear it.
3198 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3199 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3200 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3201 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3202 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3203 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3204 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3205 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3206 */
3207
3208 /**
3209 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3210 *
3211 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3212 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3213 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3214 *
3215 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3216 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3217 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3218 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3219 * the driver code.
3220 *
3221 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3222 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3223 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3224 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3225 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3226 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3227 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3228 *
3229 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3230 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3231 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3232 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3233 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3234 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3235 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3236 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3237 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3238 * @sta_notify callback.
3239 *
3240 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3241 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3242 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3243 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3244 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3245 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3246 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3247 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3248 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3249 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3250 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3251 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3252 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3253 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3254 *
3255 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3256 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3257 *
3258 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3259 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3260 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3261 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3262 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3263 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3264 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3265 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3266 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3267 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3268 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3269 *
3270 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3271 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3272 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3273 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3274 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3275 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3276 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3277 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3278 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3279 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3280 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3281 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3282 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3283 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3284 *
3285 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3286 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3287 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3288 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3289 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3290 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3291 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3292 *
3293 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3294 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3295 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3296 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3297 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3298 *
3299 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3300 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3301 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3302 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3303 */
3304
3305 /**
3306 * DOC: HW queue control
3307 *
3308 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3309 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3310 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3311 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3312 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3313 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3314 *
3315 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3316 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3317 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3318 *
3319 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3320 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3321 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3322 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3323 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3324 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3325 * the hardware queue.
3326 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3327 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3328 *
3329 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3330 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3331 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3332 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3333 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3334 *
3335 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3336 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3337 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3338 * off-channel queue: 9
3339 *
3340 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3341 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3342 *
3343 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3344 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3345 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3346 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3347 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3348 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3349 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3350 *
3351 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3352 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3353 *
3354 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3355 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3356 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3357 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3358 */
3359
3360 /**
3361 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3362 *
3363 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3364 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3365 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3366 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3367 *
3368 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3369 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3370 * multicast address.
3371 *
3372 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3373 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3374 *
3375 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3376 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3377 *
3378 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3379 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3380 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3381 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3382 * honour this flag if possible.
3383 *
3384 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3385 * station
3386 *
3387 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3388 *
3389 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3390 *
3391 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3392 *
3393 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3394 */
3395 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3396 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3397 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3398 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3399 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3400 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3401 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3402 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3403 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3404 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3405 };
3406
3407 /**
3408 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3409 *
3410 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3411 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3412 *
3413 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3414 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3415 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3416 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3417 *
3418 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3419 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3420 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3421 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3422 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3423 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3424 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3425 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3426 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3427 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3428 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3429 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3430 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3431 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3432 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3433 * session is gone and removes the station.
3434 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3435 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3436 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3437 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3438 */
3439 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3440 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3441 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3442 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3443 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3444 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3445 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3446 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3447 };
3448
3449 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3450 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3451
3452 /**
3453 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3454 *
3455 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3456 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3457 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3458 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3459 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3460 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3461 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3462 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3463 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3464 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3465 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3466 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3467 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3468 */
3469 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3470 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3471 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3472 u16 tid;
3473 u16 ssn;
3474 u16 buf_size;
3475 bool amsdu;
3476 u16 timeout;
3477 };
3478
3479 /**
3480 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3481 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3482 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3483 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3484 */
3485 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3486 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3487 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3488 };
3489
3490 /**
3491 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3492 *
3493 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3494 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3495 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3496 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3497 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3498 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3499 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3500 * the peer.
3501 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3502 * by the peer
3503 */
3504 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3505 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3506 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3507 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3508 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3509 };
3510
3511 /**
3512 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3513 *
3514 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3515 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3516 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3517 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3518 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3519 *
3520 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3521 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3522 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3523 */
3524 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3525 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3526 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3527 };
3528
3529 /**
3530 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3531 *
3532 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3533 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3534 *
3535 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3536 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3537 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3538 * of wowlan configuration)
3539 */
3540 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3541 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3542 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3543 };
3544
3545 /**
3546 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3547 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3548 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3549 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3550 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3551 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3552 * valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3553 */
3554 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3555 u16 duration;
3556 u16 subtype;
3557 u8 success:1;
3558 };
3559
3560 /**
3561 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3562 *
3563 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3564 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3565 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3566 *
3567 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3568 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3569 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3570 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3571 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3572 * Must be atomic.
3573 *
3574 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3575 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3576 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3577 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3578 * or zero.
3579 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3580 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3581 * is added.
3582 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3583 *
3584 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3585 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3586 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3587 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3588 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3589 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3590 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3591 *
3592 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3593 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3594 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3595 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3596 * reconfigured at resume time.
3597 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3598 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3599 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3600 * must return 1 from this function.
3601 *
3602 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3603 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3604 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3605 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3606 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3607 *
3608 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3609 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3610 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3611 * in suspend().
3612 *
3613 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3614 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3615 * and @stop must be implemented.
3616 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3617 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3618 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3619 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3620 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3621 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3622 *
3623 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3624 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3625 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3626 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3627 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3628 *
3629 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3630 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3631 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3632 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3633 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3634 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3635 * MAC address of the device going away.
3636 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3637 *
3638 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3639 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3640 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3641 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3642 *
3643 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3644 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3645 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3646 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3647 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3648 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3649 * can sleep.
3650 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed
3651 * are not implemented.
3652 *
3653 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface
3654 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the
3655 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.)
3656 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed.
3657 * The callback can sleep.
3658 *
3659 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link
3660 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an
3661 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information.
3662 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id
3663 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for
3664 * non-MLO connections.
3665 * The callback can sleep.
3666 *
3667 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3668 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3669 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3670 *
3671 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3672 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3673 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3674 *
3675 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3676 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3677 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3678 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3679 * which flags are changed.
3680 * This callback can sleep.
3681 *
3682 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3683 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3684 *
3685 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3686 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3687 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3688 * is enabled.
3689 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3690 * The callback can sleep.
3691 *
3692 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3693 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3694 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3695 * The callback must be atomic.
3696 *
3697 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3698 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3699 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3700 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3701 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3702 *
3703 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3704 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3705 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3706 *
3707 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3708 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3709 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3710 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3711 * that power save is disabled.
3712 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3713 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3714 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3715 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3716 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3717 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3718 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3719 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3720 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3721 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3722 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3723 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3724 * The callback can sleep.
3725 *
3726 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3727 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3728 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3729 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3730 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3731 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3732 * The callback can sleep.
3733 *
3734 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3735 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3736 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3737 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3738 *
3739 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3740 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3741 *
3742 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3743 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3744 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3745 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3746 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3747 *
3748 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3749 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3750 * this notification.
3751 * The callback can sleep.
3752 *
3753 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3754 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3755 * The callback can sleep.
3756 *
3757 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3758 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3759 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3760 * The callback must be atomic.
3761 *
3762 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3763 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3764 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3765 * should be set as well.
3766 * The callback can sleep.
3767 *
3768 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3769 * The callback can sleep.
3770 *
3771 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3772 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3773 *
3774 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3775 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3776 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3777 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3778 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3779 * This callback can sleep.
3780 *
3781 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3782 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3783 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3784 * callback can sleep.
3785 *
3786 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3787 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3788 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3789 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3790 *
3791 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3792 * power for the station.
3793 * This callback can sleep.
3794 *
3795 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3796 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3797 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3798 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3799 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3800 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3801 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3802 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3803 * The callback can sleep.
3804 *
3805 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3806 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3807 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3808 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3809 * in @sta_state.
3810 * The callback can sleep.
3811 *
3812 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3813 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3814 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3815 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3816 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3817 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3818 * Must be atomic.
3819 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3820 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3821 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3822 *
3823 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3824 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3825 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3826 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3827 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3828 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3829 * The callback can sleep.
3830 *
3831 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3832 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3833 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3834 * The callback can sleep.
3835 *
3836 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3837 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3838 * required function.
3839 * The callback can sleep.
3840 *
3841 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3842 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3843 * required function.
3844 * The callback can sleep.
3845 *
3846 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3847 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3848 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3849 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3850 * The callback can sleep.
3851 *
3852 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3853 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3854 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3855 * TSF synchronization.
3856 * The callback can sleep.
3857 *
3858 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3859 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3860 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3861 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3862 * The callback can sleep.
3863 *
3864 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3865 *
3866 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3867 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3868 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3869 * The callback can sleep.
3870 *
3871 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3872 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3873 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3874 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3875 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3876 *
3877 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3878 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3879 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3880 *
3881 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3882 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3883 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3884 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3885 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3886 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3887 * The callback can sleep.
3888 *
3889 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3890 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3891 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3892 * completion of the channel switch.
3893 *
3894 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3895 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3896 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3897 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3898 *
3899 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3900 *
3901 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3902 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3903 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3904 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3905 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3906 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3907 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3908 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3909 * must be accepted in this case.
3910 * This callback may sleep.
3911 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3912 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3913 *
3914 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3915 *
3916 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3917 *
3918 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3919 * queues before entering power save.
3920 *
3921 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3922 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3923 * The callback can sleep.
3924 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3925 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3926 * The callback must be atomic.
3927 *
3928 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3929 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3930 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3931 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3932 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3933 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3934 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3935 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3936 * more-data bit must always be set.
3937 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3938 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3939 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3940 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3941 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3942 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3943 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3944 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3945 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3946 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3947 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3948 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3949 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3950 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3951 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3952 * This callback must be atomic.
3953 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3954 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3955 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3956 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3957 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3958 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3959 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3960 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3961 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3962 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3963 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3964 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3965 * This callback must be atomic.
3966 *
3967 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3968 *
3969 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3970 *
3971 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3972 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3973 *
3974 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3975 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3976 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3977 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3978 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3979 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3980 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3981 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3982 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3983 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3984 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3985 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3986 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3987 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3988 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3989 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3990 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3991 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3992 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3993 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3994 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3995 *
3996 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3997 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3998 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3999 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
4000 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
4001 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
4002 * 2 * (DTIM period).
4003 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
4004 *
4005 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
4006 * This callback may sleep.
4007 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
4008 * This callback may sleep.
4009 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
4010 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
4011 * channel context with different settings
4012 * This callback may sleep.
4013 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
4014 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
4015 * This callback may sleep.
4016 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
4017 * unbound from vif.
4018 * This callback may sleep.
4019 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
4020 * another, as specified in the list of
4021 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
4022 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
4023 * This callback may sleep.
4024 *
4025 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
4026 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
4027 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
4028 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
4029 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
4030 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
4031 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
4032 *
4033 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
4034 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
4035 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
4036 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
4037 * This callback may sleep.
4038 *
4039 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
4040 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
4041 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
4042 *
4043 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
4044 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
4045 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
4046 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
4047 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
4048 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
4049 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
4050 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
4051 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
4052 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
4053 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4054 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
4055 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
4056 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
4057 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4058 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
4059 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4060 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4061 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
4062 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4063 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
4064 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
4065 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
4066 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
4067 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
4068 * channel context is bound before this is called.
4069 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
4070 *
4071 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
4072 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
4073 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
4074 *
4075 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
4076 * and hardware limits.
4077 *
4078 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
4079 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
4080 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
4081 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
4082 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
4083 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
4084 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
4085 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
4086 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
4087 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
4088 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
4089 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
4090 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
4091 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
4092 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
4093 * the function call.
4094 *
4095 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
4096 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
4097 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
4098 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
4099 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
4100 *
4101 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
4102 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
4103 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
4104 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
4105 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
4106 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
4107 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
4108 * changed parameters.
4109 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
4110 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
4111 * this call.
4112 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
4113 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
4114 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
4115 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
4116 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
4117 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
4118 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
4119 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
4120 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
4121 *
4122 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
4123 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
4124 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
4125 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
4126 * This callback may sleep.
4127 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
4128 * This callback may sleep.
4129 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
4130 * 4-address mode
4131 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
4132 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
4133 * to use rx decapsulation offload
4134 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
4135 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
4136 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
4137 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
4138 * twt structure.
4139 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
4140 * from the peer.
4141 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
4142 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
4143 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
4144 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
4145 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
4146 * radar channel.
4147 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
4148 * disable background CAC/radar detection.
4149 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
4150 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
4151 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while
4152 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer),
4153 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or
4154 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation.
4155 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures
4156 * that were already removed, in case they're needed.
4157 * This callback can sleep.
4158 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to
4159 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep.
4160 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links,
4161 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero.
4162 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them.
4163 */
4164 struct ieee80211_ops {
4165 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4166 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4167 struct sk_buff *skb);
4168 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4169 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4170 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
4171 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4172 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4173 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4174 #endif
4175 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4176 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4177 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4179 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4180 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4181 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4182 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4183 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4184 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4185 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4186 u64 changed);
4187 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4188 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4189 u64 changed);
4190 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4191 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4192 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4193 u64 changed);
4194
4195 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4196 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4197 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4198 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4199
4200 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4201 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4202 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4203 unsigned int changed_flags,
4204 unsigned int *total_flags,
4205 u64 multicast);
4206 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4207 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4208 unsigned int filter_flags,
4209 unsigned int changed_flags);
4210 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4211 bool set);
4212 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4213 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4214 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4215 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4216 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4217 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4218 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4219 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4220 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4221 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4222 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4223 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4225 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4226 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4227 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4228 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4229 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4230 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4231 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4232 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4233 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4234 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4235 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4236 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4237 const u8 *mac_addr);
4238 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4239 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4240 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4241 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4242 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4243 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4244 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4245 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4246 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4247 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4248 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4249 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4250 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4251 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4252 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4253 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4254 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4255 struct dentry *dir);
4256 #endif
4257 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4258 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4259 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4260 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4261 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4262 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4263 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4264 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4265 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4266 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4267 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4268 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4269 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4270 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4271 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4272 u32 changed);
4273 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4274 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4275 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4276 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4277 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4278 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4279 struct station_info *sinfo);
4280 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4281 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4282 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac,
4283 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4284 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4285 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4286 u64 tsf);
4287 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4288 s64 offset);
4289 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4290 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4291
4292 /**
4293 * @ampdu_action:
4294 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4295 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4296 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4297 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4298 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4299 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4300 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4301 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4302 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4303 *
4304 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4305 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4306 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
4307 *
4308 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4309 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4310 *
4311 * - ``TX: 1 or``
4312 * - ``TX: 18 or``
4313 * - ``TX: 81``
4314 *
4315 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4316 *
4317 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4318 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4319 * if the session can start immediately.
4320 *
4321 * The callback can sleep.
4322 */
4323 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4324 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4325 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4326 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4327 struct survey_info *survey);
4328 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4329 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4330 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4331 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4332 void *data, int len);
4333 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4334 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4335 void *data, int len);
4336 #endif
4337 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4338 u32 queues, bool drop);
4339 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4340 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4341 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4342 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4343 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4344
4345 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4346 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4347 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4348 int duration,
4349 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4350 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4351 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4352 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4353 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4354 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4355 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4356 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4357 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4358 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4359 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4360 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4361
4362 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4363 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4364 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4365 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4366 bool more_data);
4367 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4368 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4369 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4370 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4371 bool more_data);
4372
4373 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4374 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4375 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4376 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4377 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4378 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4379 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4380 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4381
4382 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4383 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4384 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4385 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4386 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4387 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4388
4389 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4391
4392 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4393 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4394 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4395 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4396 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4397 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4398 u32 changed);
4399 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4400 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4401 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4402 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4403 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4404 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4405 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4406 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4407 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4408 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4409 int n_vifs,
4410 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4411
4412 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4413 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4414
4415 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4416 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4417 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4418 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4419 #endif
4420 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4421 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4422 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4423 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4424 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4425 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4426
4427 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4428 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4429 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4430 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4431 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4432 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4433 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4434
4435 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4436 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4437 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4438 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4439 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4440 int *dbm);
4441
4442 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4443 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4444 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4445 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4446 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4447 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4448 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4449 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4450 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4451 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4452 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4453
4454 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4455 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4456 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4457
4458 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4459 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4460 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4461 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4462 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4463 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4465 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4466 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4467 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4468 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4469 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4470 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4471 u8 instance_id);
4472 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4473 struct sk_buff *head,
4474 struct sk_buff *skb);
4475 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4476 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4477 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4478 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4479 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4480 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4481 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4482 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4483 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4484 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4485 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4486 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4488 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4489 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4490 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4491 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4492 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4493 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4494 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4495 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4496 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4497 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4498 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4499 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4500 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4501 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4502 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4503 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4504 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4505 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4507 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4508 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4509 struct net_device_path *path);
4510 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4511 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4512 u16 old_links, u16 new_links,
4513 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]);
4514 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4516 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4517 u16 old_links, u16 new_links);
4518 };
4519
4520 /**
4521 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4522 *
4523 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4524 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4525 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4526 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4527 * @priv_data_len.
4528 *
4529 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4530 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4531 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4532 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4533 *
4534 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4535 */
4536 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4537 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4538 const char *requested_name);
4539
4540 /**
4541 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4542 *
4543 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4544 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4545 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4546 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4547 * @priv_data_len.
4548 *
4549 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4550 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4551 *
4552 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4553 */
4554 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4555 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4556 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4557 {
4558 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4559 }
4560
4561 /**
4562 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4563 *
4564 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4565 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4566 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4567 *
4568 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4569 *
4570 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4571 */
4572 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4573
4574 /**
4575 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4576 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4577 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4578 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4579 */
4580 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4581 int throughput;
4582 int blink_time;
4583 };
4584
4585 /**
4586 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4587 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4588 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4589 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4590 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4591 */
4592 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4593 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4594 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4595 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4596 };
4597
4598 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4599 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4600 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4601 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4602 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4603 const char *
4604 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4605 unsigned int flags,
4606 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4607 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4608 #endif
4609 /**
4610 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4611 *
4612 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4613 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4614 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4615 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4616 *
4617 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4618 *
4619 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4620 */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4621 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4622 {
4623 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4624 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4625 #else
4626 return NULL;
4627 #endif
4628 }
4629
4630 /**
4631 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4632 *
4633 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4634 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4635 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4636 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4637 *
4638 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4639 *
4640 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4641 */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4642 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4643 {
4644 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4645 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4646 #else
4647 return NULL;
4648 #endif
4649 }
4650
4651 /**
4652 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4653 *
4654 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4655 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4656 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4657 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4658 *
4659 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4660 *
4661 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4662 */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4663 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4664 {
4665 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4666 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4667 #else
4668 return NULL;
4669 #endif
4670 }
4671
4672 /**
4673 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4674 *
4675 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4676 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4677 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4678 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4679 *
4680 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4681 *
4682 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4683 */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4684 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4685 {
4686 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4687 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4688 #else
4689 return NULL;
4690 #endif
4691 }
4692
4693 /**
4694 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4695 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4696 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4697 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4698 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4699 *
4700 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4701 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4702 *
4703 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4704 */
4705 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4706 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4707 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4708 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4709 {
4710 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4711 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4712 blink_table_len);
4713 #else
4714 return NULL;
4715 #endif
4716 }
4717
4718 /**
4719 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4720 *
4721 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4722 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4723 *
4724 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4725 */
4726 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4727
4728 /**
4729 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4730 *
4731 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4732 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4733 * before calling this function.
4734 *
4735 * @hw: the hardware to free
4736 */
4737 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4738
4739 /**
4740 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4741 *
4742 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4743 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4744 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4745 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4746 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4747 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4748 *
4749 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4750 */
4751 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4752
4753 /**
4754 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4755 *
4756 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4757 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4758 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4759 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4760 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4761 *
4762 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4763 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4764 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4765 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4766 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4767 *
4768 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4769 *
4770 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4771 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4772 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4773 * @list: the destination list
4774 */
4775 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4776 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4777
4778 /**
4779 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4780 *
4781 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4782 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4783 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4784 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4785 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4786 *
4787 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4788 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4789 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4790 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4791 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4792 *
4793 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4794 *
4795 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4796 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4797 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4798 * @napi: the NAPI context
4799 */
4800 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4801 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4802
4803 /**
4804 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4805 *
4806 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4807 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4808 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4809 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4810 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4811 *
4812 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4813 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4814 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4815 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4816 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4817 *
4818 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4819 *
4820 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4821 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4822 */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4823 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4824 {
4825 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4826 }
4827
4828 /**
4829 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4830 *
4831 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4832 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4833 *
4834 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4835 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4836 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4837 *
4838 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4839 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4840 */
4841 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4842
4843 /**
4844 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4845 *
4846 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4847 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4848 *
4849 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4850 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4851 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4852 *
4853 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4854 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4855 */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4856 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4857 struct sk_buff *skb)
4858 {
4859 local_bh_disable();
4860 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4861 local_bh_enable();
4862 }
4863
4864 /**
4865 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4866 *
4867 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4868 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4869 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4870 *
4871 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4872 *
4873 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4874 * each other.
4875 *
4876 * @sta: currently connected sta
4877 * @start: start or stop PS
4878 *
4879 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4880 */
4881 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4882
4883 /**
4884 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4885 * (in process context)
4886 *
4887 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4888 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4889 * applies.
4890 *
4891 * @sta: currently connected sta
4892 * @start: start or stop PS
4893 *
4894 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4895 */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4896 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4897 bool start)
4898 {
4899 int ret;
4900
4901 local_bh_disable();
4902 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4903 local_bh_enable();
4904
4905 return ret;
4906 }
4907
4908 /**
4909 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4910 * @sta: currently connected station
4911 *
4912 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4913 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4914 * connected station was received.
4915 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4916 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4917 * be serialized.
4918 */
4919 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4920
4921 /**
4922 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4923 * @sta: currently connected station
4924 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4925 *
4926 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4927 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4928 * from a connected station was received.
4929 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4930 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4931 * serialized.
4932 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4933 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4934 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4935 * checks.
4936 */
4937 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4938
4939 /*
4940 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4941 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4942 */
4943 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4944
4945 /**
4946 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4947 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4948 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4949 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4950 *
4951 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4952 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4953 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4954 *
4955 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4956 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4957 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4958 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4959 *
4960 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4961 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4962 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4963 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4964 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4965 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4966 *
4967 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4968 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4969 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4970 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4971 * use this API.
4972 */
4973 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4974 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4975
4976 /**
4977 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4978 *
4979 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4980 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4981 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4982 *
4983 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4984 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4985 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4986 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4987 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4988 */
4989 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4990 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4991 struct sk_buff *skb,
4992 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4993 int max_rates);
4994
4995 /**
4996 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4997 *
4998 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4999 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
5000 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
5001 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
5002 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
5003 * slow stations to starve).
5004 *
5005 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
5006 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
5007 */
5008 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5009 u32 thr);
5010
5011 /**
5012 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
5013 *
5014 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
5015 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
5016 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
5017 *
5018 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5019 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
5020 * @info: tx status information
5021 */
5022 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5023 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5024 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
5025
5026 /**
5027 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
5028 *
5029 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
5030 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
5031 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
5032 *
5033 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5034 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
5035 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
5036 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5037 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
5038 *
5039 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5040 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5041 */
5042 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5043 struct sk_buff *skb);
5044
5045 /**
5046 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
5047 *
5048 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5049 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
5050 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
5051 *
5052 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5053 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5054 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5055 *
5056 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5057 * @status: tx status information
5058 */
5059 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5060 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
5061
5062 /**
5063 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
5064 *
5065 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5066 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
5067 * specific skbs.
5068 *
5069 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5070 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5071 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5072 *
5073 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5074 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
5075 * (NULL for multicast packets)
5076 * @info: tx status information
5077 */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)5078 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5079 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5080 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
5081 {
5082 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
5083 .sta = sta,
5084 .info = info,
5085 };
5086
5087 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
5088 }
5089
5090 /**
5091 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
5092 *
5093 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
5094 *
5095 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5096 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
5097 * for a single hardware.
5098 *
5099 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5100 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5101 */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)5102 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5103 struct sk_buff *skb)
5104 {
5105 local_bh_disable();
5106 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
5107 local_bh_enable();
5108 }
5109
5110 /**
5111 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
5112 *
5113 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
5114 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
5115 *
5116 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5117 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5118 *
5119 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5120 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5121 */
5122 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5123 struct sk_buff *skb);
5124
5125 /**
5126 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
5127 *
5128 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
5129 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
5130 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
5131 * 802.11 frames.
5132 *
5133 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5134 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
5135 * calls in the same tx status family.
5136 *
5137 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5138 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
5139 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5140 */
5141 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5142 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5143 struct sk_buff *skb);
5144
5145 /**
5146 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
5147 *
5148 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
5149 * connected STA.
5150 *
5151 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
5152 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
5153 */
5154 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
5155
5156 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
5157
5158 /**
5159 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
5160 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
5161 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
5162 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
5163 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
5164 * should be ignored.
5165 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
5166 */
5167 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
5168 u16 tim_offset;
5169 u16 tim_length;
5170
5171 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
5172 u16 mbssid_off;
5173 };
5174
5175 /**
5176 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
5177 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5178 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5179 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5180 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5181 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5182 *
5183 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5184 * obtain the beacon template.
5185 *
5186 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
5187 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5188 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5189 * applicable, the CSA count.
5190 *
5191 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5192 *
5193 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5194 */
5195 struct sk_buff *
5196 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5197 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5198 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5199 unsigned int link_id);
5200
5201 /**
5202 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5203 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5204 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5205 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5206 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5207 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5208 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
5209 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5210 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5211 *
5212 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5213 * obtain the beacon frame.
5214 *
5215 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5216 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5217 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5218 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5219 *
5220 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5221 *
5222 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5223 */
5224 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5225 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5226 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length,
5227 unsigned int link_id);
5228
5229 /**
5230 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5231 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5232 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5233 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5234 *
5235 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5236 *
5237 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5238 */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif,unsigned int link_id)5239 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5240 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5241 unsigned int link_id)
5242 {
5243 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id);
5244 }
5245
5246 /**
5247 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5248 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5249 *
5250 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5251 * This function is called implicitly when
5252 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5253 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5254 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5255 *
5256 * Return: new countdown value
5257 */
5258 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5259
5260 /**
5261 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5262 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5263 * @counter: the new value for the counter
5264 *
5265 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5266 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5267 *
5268 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5269 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5270 */
5271 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5272
5273 /**
5274 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5275 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5276 *
5277 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5278 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5279 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5280 */
5281 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5282
5283 /**
5284 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5285 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5286 *
5287 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5288 */
5289 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5290
5291 /**
5292 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5293 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5294 *
5295 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5296 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5297 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5298 */
5299 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5300
5301 /**
5302 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5303 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5304 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5305 *
5306 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5307 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5308 *
5309 * Can only be called in AP mode.
5310 *
5311 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5312 */
5313 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5314 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5315
5316 /**
5317 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5318 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5319 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5320 *
5321 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5322 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5323 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5324 *
5325 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5326 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5327 *
5328 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5329 */
5330 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5331 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5332
5333 /**
5334 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5335 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5336 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5337 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses
5338 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with
5339 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be.
5340 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5341 * if at all possible
5342 *
5343 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5344 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5345 * BSSID and address is used.
5346 *
5347 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5348 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5349 *
5350 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5351 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5352 *
5353 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5354 */
5355 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5356 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5357 int link_id, bool qos_ok);
5358
5359 /**
5360 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5361 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5362 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5363 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5364 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5365 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5366 *
5367 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5368 * hardware.
5369 *
5370 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5371 */
5372 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5373 const u8 *src_addr,
5374 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5375 size_t tailroom);
5376
5377 /**
5378 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5379 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5380 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5381 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5382 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5383 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5384 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5385 *
5386 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5387 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5388 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5389 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5390 */
5391 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5392 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5393 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5394 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5395
5396 /**
5397 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5398 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5399 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5400 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5401 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5402 *
5403 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5404 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5405 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5406 *
5407 * Return: The duration.
5408 */
5409 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5411 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5412
5413 /**
5414 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5415 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5416 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5417 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5418 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5419 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5420 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5421 *
5422 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5423 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5424 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5425 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5426 */
5427 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5428 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5429 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5430 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5431 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5432
5433 /**
5434 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5435 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5436 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5437 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5438 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5439 *
5440 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5441 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5442 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5443 *
5444 * Return: The duration.
5445 */
5446 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5447 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5448 size_t frame_len,
5449 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5450
5451 /**
5452 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5453 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5454 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5455 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5456 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5457 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5458 *
5459 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5460 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5461 *
5462 * Return: The duration.
5463 */
5464 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5465 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5466 enum nl80211_band band,
5467 size_t frame_len,
5468 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5469
5470 /**
5471 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5472 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5473 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5474 *
5475 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5476 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5477 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5478 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5479 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5480 *
5481 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5482 * frames are available.
5483 *
5484 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5485 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5486 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5487 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5488 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5489 * use common code for all beacons.
5490 */
5491 struct sk_buff *
5492 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5493
5494 /**
5495 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5496 *
5497 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5498 *
5499 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5500 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5501 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5502 */
5503 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5504 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5505
5506 /**
5507 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5508 *
5509 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5510 * from the given packet.
5511 *
5512 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5513 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5514 * with this P1K
5515 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5516 */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5517 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5518 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5519 {
5520 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5521 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5522 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5523
5524 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5525 }
5526
5527 /**
5528 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5529 *
5530 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5531 * and transmitter address.
5532 *
5533 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5534 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5535 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5536 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5537 */
5538 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5539 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5540
5541 /**
5542 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5543 *
5544 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5545 * in the packet.
5546 *
5547 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5548 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5549 * encrypted with this key
5550 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5551 */
5552 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5553 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5554
5555 /**
5556 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5557 *
5558 * @pos: start of crypto header
5559 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5560 * @pn: PN to add
5561 *
5562 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5563 * the packet payload)
5564 *
5565 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5566 * point to the crypto header)
5567 */
5568 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5569
5570 /**
5571 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5572 *
5573 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5574 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5575 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5576 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5577 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5578 *
5579 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5580 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5581 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5582 *
5583 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5584 * can be done concurrently.
5585 */
5586 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5587 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5588
5589 /**
5590 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5591 *
5592 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5593 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5594 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5595 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5596 * @seq: new sequence data
5597 *
5598 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5599 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5600 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5601 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5602 *
5603 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5604 * can be done concurrently.
5605 */
5606 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5607 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5608
5609 /**
5610 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5611 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5612 *
5613 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5614 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5615 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5616 *
5617 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5618 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5619 */
5620 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5621
5622 /**
5623 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5624 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5625 * @keyconf: new key data
5626 *
5627 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5628 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5629 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5630 *
5631 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5632 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5633 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5634 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5635 *
5636 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5637 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5638 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5639 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5640 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5641 * of the reconfiguration.
5642 *
5643 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5644 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5645 *
5646 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5647 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5648 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5649 * the key that's being replaced.
5650 */
5651 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5652 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5653 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5654
5655 /**
5656 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5657 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5658 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5659 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5660 * @gfp: allocation flags
5661 */
5662 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5663 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5664
5665 /**
5666 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5667 *
5668 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5669 * at the same time.
5670 *
5671 * @keyconf: the key in question
5672 */
5673 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5674
5675 /**
5676 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5677 *
5678 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5679 * at the same time.
5680 *
5681 * @keyconf: the key in question
5682 */
5683 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5684
5685 /**
5686 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5687 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5688 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5689 *
5690 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5691 */
5692 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5693
5694 /**
5695 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5696 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5697 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5698 *
5699 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5700 */
5701 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5702
5703 /**
5704 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5705 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5706 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5707 *
5708 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5709 *
5710 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5711 */
5712
5713 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5714
5715 /**
5716 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5717 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5718 *
5719 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5720 */
5721 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5722
5723 /**
5724 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5725 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5726 *
5727 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5728 */
5729 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5730
5731 /**
5732 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5733 *
5734 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5735 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5736 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5737 * any context, including hardirq context.
5738 *
5739 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5740 * @info: information about the completed scan
5741 */
5742 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5743 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5744
5745 /**
5746 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5747 *
5748 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5749 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5750 *
5751 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5752 */
5753 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5754
5755 /**
5756 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5757 *
5758 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5759 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5760 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5761 * while associating, for instance.
5762 *
5763 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5764 */
5765 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5766
5767 /**
5768 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5769 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5770 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5771 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5772 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5773 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5774 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5775 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5776 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5777 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5778 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5779 * for instance.
5780 */
5781 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5782 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5783 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5784 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5785 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
5786 };
5787
5788 /**
5789 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5790 *
5791 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5792 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5793 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5794 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5795 *
5796 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5797 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5798 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5799 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5800 */
5801 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5802 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5803 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5804 void *data);
5805
5806 /**
5807 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5808 *
5809 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5810 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5811 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5812 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5813 * be used.
5814 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5815 *
5816 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5817 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5818 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5819 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5820 */
5821 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5822 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5823 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5824 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5825 void *data)
5826 {
5827 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5828 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5829 iterator, data);
5830 }
5831
5832 /**
5833 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5834 *
5835 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5836 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5837 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5838 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5839 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5840 *
5841 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5842 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5843 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5844 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5845 */
5846 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5847 u32 iter_flags,
5848 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5849 u8 *mac,
5850 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5851 void *data);
5852
5853 /**
5854 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5855 *
5856 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5857 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5858 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5859 * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in
5860 * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within
5861 * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks.
5862 *
5863 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5864 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5865 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5866 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5867 */
5868 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5869 u32 iter_flags,
5870 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5871 u8 *mac,
5872 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5873 void *data);
5874
5875 /**
5876 * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations
5877 *
5878 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5879 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5880 * function for them.
5881 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5882 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used.
5883 *
5884 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5885 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5886 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5887 */
5888 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5889 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5890 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5891 void *data);
5892
5893 /**
5894 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5895 *
5896 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5897 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5898 * function for them.
5899 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5900 *
5901 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5902 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5903 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5904 */
5905 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5906 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5907 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5908 void *data);
5909 /**
5910 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5911 *
5912 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5913 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5914 *
5915 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5916 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5917 */
5918 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5919
5920 /**
5921 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5922 *
5923 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5924 * workqueue.
5925 *
5926 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5927 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5928 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5929 */
5930 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5931 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5932 unsigned long delay);
5933
5934 /**
5935 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5936 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5937 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5938 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5939 *
5940 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5941 *
5942 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5943 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5944 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5945 */
5946 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5947 u16 timeout);
5948
5949 /**
5950 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5951 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5952 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5953 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5954 *
5955 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5956 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5957 * from any context.
5958 */
5959 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5960 u16 tid);
5961
5962 /**
5963 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5964 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5965 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5966 *
5967 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5968 *
5969 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5970 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5971 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5972 */
5973 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5974
5975 /**
5976 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5977 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5978 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5979 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5980 *
5981 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5982 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5983 * can be called from any context.
5984 */
5985 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5986 u16 tid);
5987
5988 /**
5989 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5990 *
5991 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5992 * @addr: station's address
5993 *
5994 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5995 *
5996 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5997 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5998 */
5999 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6000 const u8 *addr);
6001
6002 /**
6003 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
6004 *
6005 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6006 * @addr: remote station's address
6007 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
6008 *
6009 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6010 *
6011 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6012 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6013 *
6014 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
6015 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
6016 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
6017 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
6018 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
6019 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
6020 * is not reliable.
6021 *
6022 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
6023 */
6024 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6025 const u8 *addr,
6026 const u8 *localaddr);
6027
6028 /**
6029 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses
6030 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6031 * @addr: remote station's link address
6032 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that)
6033 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found,
6034 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed
6035 *
6036 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection.
6037 */
6038 struct ieee80211_sta *
6039 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6040 const u8 *addr,
6041 const u8 *localaddr,
6042 unsigned int *link_id);
6043
6044 /**
6045 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
6046 * @hw: the hardware
6047 * @pubsta: the station
6048 * @block: whether to block or unblock
6049 *
6050 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
6051 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
6052 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
6053 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
6054 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
6055 *
6056 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
6057 * manner.
6058 *
6059 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
6060 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
6061 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
6062 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
6063 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
6064 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
6065 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
6066 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
6067 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
6068 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
6069 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
6070 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
6071 * woke up while blocked or not.
6072 */
6073 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6074 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
6075
6076 /**
6077 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
6078 * @pubsta: the station
6079 *
6080 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
6081 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
6082 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
6083 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
6084 *
6085 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
6086 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
6087 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
6088 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
6089 *
6090 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
6091 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
6092 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
6093 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
6094 */
6095 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6096
6097 /**
6098 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
6099 * @pubsta: the station
6100 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
6101 *
6102 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
6103 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
6104 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
6105 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
6106 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
6107 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
6108 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
6109 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
6110 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
6111 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
6112 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
6113 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
6114 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
6115 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
6116 */
6117 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
6118
6119 /**
6120 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change
6121 * @pubsta: the station
6122 *
6123 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in
6124 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of
6125 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta.
6126 *
6127 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case
6128 * there is no need to call this function.
6129 */
6130 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6131
6132 /**
6133 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
6134 *
6135 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
6136 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
6137 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
6138 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
6139 *
6140 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
6141 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
6142 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
6143 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
6144 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
6145 * attempts.
6146 *
6147 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
6148 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
6149 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
6150 * them to 0.
6151 *
6152 * @pubsta: the station
6153 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
6154 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
6155 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
6156 */
6157 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6158 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
6159
6160 /**
6161 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
6162 *
6163 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6164 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6165 *
6166 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
6167 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
6168 */
6169 bool
6170 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6171
6172 /**
6173 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
6174 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6175 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6176 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6177 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6178 *
6179 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6180 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6181 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
6182 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
6183 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
6184 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
6185 *
6186 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
6187 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
6188 * set_key callback.
6189 */
6190 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6191 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6192 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6193 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6194 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6195 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6196 void *data),
6197 void *iter_data);
6198
6199 /**
6200 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
6201 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6202 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6203 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6204 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6205 *
6206 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6207 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6208 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
6209 * in removal process will be skipped.
6210 *
6211 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
6212 * and thus iter must be atomic.
6213 */
6214 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6215 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6216 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6217 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6218 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6219 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6220 void *data),
6221 void *iter_data);
6222
6223 /**
6224 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
6225 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6226 * @iter: iterator function
6227 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
6228 *
6229 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
6230 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
6231 * places while calling into the driver.
6232 *
6233 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
6234 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
6235 * removed.
6236 *
6237 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
6238 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
6239 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
6240 * or not.
6241 */
6242 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
6243 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6244 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6245 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6246 void *data),
6247 void *iter_data);
6248
6249 /**
6250 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6251 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6252 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6253 *
6254 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6255 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6256 * information. This function must only be called from within the
6257 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6258 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6259 * %NULL.
6260 *
6261 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6262 */
6263 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6264 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6265
6266 /**
6267 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6268 *
6269 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6270 *
6271 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6272 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6273 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6274 */
6275 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6276
6277 /**
6278 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6279 *
6280 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6281 *
6282 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6283 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6284 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6285 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6286 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6287 *
6288 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6289 * without connection recovery attempts.
6290 */
6291 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6292
6293 /**
6294 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6295 *
6296 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6297 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6298 *
6299 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6300 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6301 */
6302 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6303
6304 /**
6305 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6306 *
6307 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6308 *
6309 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6310 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6311 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6312 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6313 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6314 *
6315 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6316 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6317 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6318 * disconnect normally later.
6319 *
6320 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6321 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6322 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6323 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6324 */
6325 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6326
6327 /**
6328 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
6329 * hardware restart
6330 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6331 *
6332 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
6333 * hardware restart.
6334 */
6335 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6336
6337 /**
6338 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6339 * rssi threshold triggered
6340 *
6341 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6342 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6343 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6344 * @gfp: context flags
6345 *
6346 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6347 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6348 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6349 */
6350 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6351 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6352 s32 rssi_level,
6353 gfp_t gfp);
6354
6355 /**
6356 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6357 *
6358 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6359 * @gfp: context flags
6360 */
6361 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6362
6363 /**
6364 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6365 *
6366 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6367 */
6368 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6369
6370 /**
6371 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6372 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6373 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6374 *
6375 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6376 * and wake up the suspended queues.
6377 */
6378 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6379
6380 /**
6381 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6382 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6383 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6384 *
6385 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6386 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6387 * a deauth frame in this case.
6388 */
6389 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6390 bool block_tx);
6391
6392 /**
6393 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6394 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6395 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0
6396 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6397 *
6398 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6399 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6400 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6401 */
6402 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6403 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6404
6405 /**
6406 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6407 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6408 */
6409 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6410
6411 /**
6412 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6413 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6414 */
6415 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6416
6417 /**
6418 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6419 *
6420 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6421 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6422 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6423 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6424 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6425 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6426 *
6427 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6428 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6429 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6430 */
6431 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6432 const u8 *addr);
6433
6434 /**
6435 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6436 * @pubsta: station struct
6437 * @tid: the session's TID
6438 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6439 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
6440 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6441 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6442 *
6443 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6444 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6445 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6446 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6447 */
6448 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6449 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6450 u16 received_mpdus);
6451
6452 /**
6453 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6454 *
6455 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6456 * buffer.
6457 *
6458 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6459 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6460 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6461 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6462 */
6463 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6464
6465 /**
6466 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6467 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6468 * @addr: station mac address
6469 * @tid: the rx tid
6470 */
6471 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6472 unsigned int tid);
6473
6474 /**
6475 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6476 *
6477 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6478 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6479 * reordering.
6480 *
6481 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6482 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6483 *
6484 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6485 * @addr: station mac address
6486 * @tid: the rx tid
6487 */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6488 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6489 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6490 {
6491 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6492 return;
6493 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6494 }
6495
6496 /**
6497 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6498 *
6499 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6500 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6501 * reordering.
6502 *
6503 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6504 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6505 *
6506 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6507 * @addr: station mac address
6508 * @tid: the rx tid
6509 */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6510 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6511 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6512 {
6513 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6514 return;
6515 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6516 }
6517
6518 /**
6519 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6520 *
6521 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6522 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6523 *
6524 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6525 *
6526 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6527 * @addr: station mac address
6528 * @tid: the rx tid
6529 */
6530 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6531 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6532
6533 /* Rate control API */
6534
6535 /**
6536 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6537 *
6538 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6539 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6540 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6541 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6542 * to be filled in
6543 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6544 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6545 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6546 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6547 * RTS threshold
6548 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6549 * if the selected rate supports it
6550 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6551 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6552 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6553 */
6554 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6555 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6556 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6557 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6558 struct sk_buff *skb;
6559 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6560 bool rts, short_preamble;
6561 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6562 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6563 bool bss;
6564 };
6565
6566 /**
6567 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6568 */
6569 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6570 /**
6571 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6572 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6573 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6574 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6575 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6576 */
6577 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6578 /**
6579 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6580 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6581 */
6582 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6583 };
6584
6585 struct rate_control_ops {
6586 unsigned long capa;
6587 const char *name;
6588 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6589 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6590 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6591 void (*free)(void *priv);
6592
6593 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6594 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6595 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6596 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6597 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6598 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6599 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6600 u32 changed);
6601 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6602 void *priv_sta);
6603
6604 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6605 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6606 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6607 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6608 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6609 struct sk_buff *skb);
6610 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6611 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6612
6613 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6614 struct dentry *dir);
6615
6616 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6617 };
6618
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6619 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6620 enum nl80211_band band,
6621 int index)
6622 {
6623 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6624 }
6625
6626 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6627 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6628 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6629 {
6630 int i;
6631
6632 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6633 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6634 return i;
6635
6636 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6637 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6638
6639 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6640 return 0;
6641 }
6642
6643 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6644 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6645 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6646 {
6647 unsigned int i;
6648
6649 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6650 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6651 return true;
6652 return false;
6653 }
6654
6655 /**
6656 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6657 *
6658 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6659 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6660 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6661 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6662 *
6663 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6664 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6665 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6666 */
6667 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6668 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6669 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6670
6671 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6672 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6673
6674 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6675 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6676 {
6677 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6678 }
6679
6680 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6681 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6682 {
6683 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6684 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6685 }
6686
6687 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6688 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6689 {
6690 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6691 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6692 }
6693
6694 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6695 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6696 {
6697 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6698 }
6699
6700 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6701 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6702 {
6703 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6704 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6705 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6706 }
6707
6708 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6709 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6710 {
6711 if (p2p) {
6712 switch (type) {
6713 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6714 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6715 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6716 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6717 default:
6718 break;
6719 }
6720 }
6721 return type;
6722 }
6723
6724 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6725 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6726 {
6727 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6728 }
6729
6730 /**
6731 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6732 *
6733 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6734 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0
6735 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6736 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6737 *
6738 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6739 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6740 * matching GroupId management frame.
6741 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6742 */
6743 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6744 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6745
6746 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6747 int rssi_min_thold,
6748 int rssi_max_thold);
6749
6750 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6751
6752 /**
6753 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6754 *
6755 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6756 *
6757 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6758 *
6759 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6760 * applicable.
6761 */
6762 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6763
6764 /**
6765 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6766 * @vif: virtual interface
6767 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6768 * @gfp: allocation flags
6769 *
6770 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6771 */
6772 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6773 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6774 gfp_t gfp);
6775
6776 /**
6777 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6778 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6779 * @vif: virtual interface
6780 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6781 * @band: the band to transmit on
6782 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6783 *
6784 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6785 */
6786 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6787 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6788 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6789
6790 /**
6791 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6792 * of injected frames.
6793 *
6794 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6795 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6796 * of the skb before calling this function.
6797 *
6798 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6799 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6800 */
6801 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6802 struct net_device *dev);
6803
6804 /**
6805 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6806 *
6807 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6808 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6809 *
6810 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6811 *
6812 * private:
6813 *
6814 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6815 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6816 */
6817 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6818 u32 next_tsf;
6819 bool has_next_tsf;
6820
6821 u8 absent;
6822
6823 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6824 struct {
6825 u32 start;
6826 u32 duration;
6827 u32 interval;
6828 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6829 };
6830
6831 /**
6832 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6833 *
6834 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6835 * @data: NoA tracking data
6836 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6837 *
6838 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6839 */
6840 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6841 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6842
6843 /**
6844 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6845 *
6846 * @data: NoA tracking data
6847 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6848 */
6849 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6850
6851 /**
6852 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6853 * @vif: virtual interface
6854 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6855 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6856 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6857 * @gfp: allocation flags
6858 *
6859 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6860 */
6861 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6862 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6863 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6864
6865 /**
6866 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6867 *
6868 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6869 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6870 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6871 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6872 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6873 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6874 *
6875 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6876 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6877 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6878 *
6879 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6880 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6881 *
6882 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6883 */
6884 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6885
6886 /**
6887 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6888 *
6889 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6890 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6891 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6892 *
6893 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6894 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6895 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6896 *
6897 * @sta: the station
6898 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6899 */
6900 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6901
6902 /**
6903 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6904 *
6905 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6906 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6907 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6908 *
6909 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6910 *
6911 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6912 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6913 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6914 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6915 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6916 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6917 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6918 *
6919 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6920 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6921 */
6922 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6923 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6924
6925 /**
6926 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6927 * (in process context)
6928 *
6929 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6930 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6931 *
6932 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6933 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6934 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6935 */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6936 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6937 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6938 {
6939 struct sk_buff *skb;
6940
6941 local_bh_disable();
6942 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6943 local_bh_enable();
6944
6945 return skb;
6946 }
6947
6948 /**
6949 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6950 *
6951 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6952 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6953 *
6954 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6955 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6956 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6957 */
6958 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6959
6960 /**
6961 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6962 *
6963 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6964 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6965 *
6966 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6967 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6968 */
6969 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6970
6971 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6972 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6973 {
6974 }
6975
6976 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6977 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6978
6979 /**
6980 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6981 *
6982 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6983 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6984 *
6985 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6986 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6987 *
6988 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6989 * this TXQ internally.
6990 */
6991 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6992 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6993 {
6994 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6995 }
6996
6997 /**
6998 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6999 *
7000 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7001 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7002 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
7003 *
7004 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
7005 * internally.
7006 */
7007 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)7008 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7009 bool force)
7010 {
7011 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
7012 }
7013
7014 /**
7015 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
7016 *
7017 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
7018 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
7019 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
7020 * next_txq().
7021 *
7022 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
7023 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
7024 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
7025 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
7026 * again.
7027 *
7028 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
7029 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
7030 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
7031 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
7032 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
7033 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
7034 *
7035 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7036 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7037 */
7038 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7039 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7040
7041 /**
7042 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
7043 *
7044 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
7045 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
7046 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
7047 *
7048 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7049 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
7050 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
7051 */
7052 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7053 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
7054 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
7055
7056 /**
7057 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
7058 *
7059 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
7060 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7061 *
7062 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7063 * @inst_id: the local instance id
7064 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
7065 * @gfp: allocation flags
7066 */
7067 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7068 u8 inst_id,
7069 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
7070 gfp_t gfp);
7071
7072 /**
7073 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
7074 *
7075 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
7076 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
7077 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7078 *
7079 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7080 * @match: match event information
7081 * @gfp: allocation flags
7082 */
7083 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7084 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
7085 gfp_t gfp);
7086
7087 /**
7088 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
7089 *
7090 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7091 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
7092 *
7093 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7094 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
7095 * information.
7096 * @len: frame length in bytes
7097 */
7098 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7099 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
7100 int len);
7101
7102 /**
7103 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
7104 *
7105 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7106 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
7107 *
7108 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7109 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
7110 * @len: frame length in bytes
7111 */
7112 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7113 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
7114 int len);
7115 /**
7116 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
7117 *
7118 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
7119 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
7120 * hardware or firmware.
7121 *
7122 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7123 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
7124 */
7125 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
7126
7127 /**
7128 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
7129 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7130 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7131 *
7132 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7133 *
7134 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
7135 */
7136 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7137 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7138
7139 /**
7140 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
7141 * probe response template.
7142 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7143 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7144 *
7145 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7146 *
7147 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
7148 */
7149 struct sk_buff *
7150 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7151 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7152
7153 /**
7154 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
7155 * collision.
7156 *
7157 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7158 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
7159 * aware of.
7160 * @gfp: allocation flags
7161 */
7162 void
7163 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7164 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp);
7165
7166 /**
7167 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
7168 *
7169 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
7170 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
7171 *
7172 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
7173 */
ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff * skb)7174 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
7175 {
7176 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
7177 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
7178
7179 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
7180 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
7181 }
7182
7183 /**
7184 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode
7185 * @vif: interface to set active links on
7186 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7187 *
7188 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface
7189 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active),
7190 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links.
7191 *
7192 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same
7193 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get
7194 * a sequence of calls like
7195 * - change_vif_links(0x11)
7196 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0)
7197 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP)
7198 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down)
7199 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0)
7200 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4)
7201 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP)
7202 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4)
7203 * - change_vif_links(0x10)
7204 *
7205 * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not
7206 * be called with any driver locks held that could cause a
7207 * lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks.
7208 */
7209 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links);
7210
7211 /**
7212 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links
7213 * @vif: interface to set active links on
7214 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7215 *
7216 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only
7217 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and
7218 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be
7219 * completed after it returns.
7220 */
7221 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7222 u16 active_links);
7223
7224 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
7225